Yamaha YPT-420 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: YPT-420

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

2 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use

an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18

AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-

dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify

any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing

units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an

audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mount-

ing ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional

accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled

or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional

ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-

mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-

tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-

ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason

its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-

ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-

chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact

Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben wer-

den. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(class B)

(battery)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også

selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : YPT-420

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

4 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (page 102) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result

in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones.

• Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or

batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same

maker, since this can cause overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/ - polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the

battery ﬂuid.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using

batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device

inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

• The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

• It emits unusual smells or smoke.

• Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

• There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor Location

(7)-1 1/2

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.

■ Handling and Maintenance

•

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of

panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

■ Saving data

• The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer.

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media.

Information

● About this manual

•

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

(bottom)

(weee_battery_en)

Connections Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the

unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identiﬁcation in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and

batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in

accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative

effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste

disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or

dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive

for the chemical involved.

(7)-1 2/2

6 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard:

Composition Title : Against All Odds

Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with

respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all

computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright

has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.

Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that

some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control

parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

Stereo Sampled Piano

The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling tech-

nology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you

maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter,

which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a

real musical instrument!

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Panel Logos

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha Digital Keyboard!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

● Included Documents

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

Provides overall explanations of this instrument.

• Data List

Contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles and Effects.

● Online Materials (Downloadable from the web)

The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library. Access the

Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (YPT-420, for example) in the Model Name area to search the

manuals.

Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

• MIDI Reference

The MIDI Reference contains MIDI related information, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation

chart.

• MIDI Basics

If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book.

The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• AC Power Adaptor

*May not be included depending on your particular area. Please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you ﬁll out

the User Registration form.

About the Manuals

Included Accessories

● Music Rest

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

8 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Special Features

■ Creating New Sounds Page 18

By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion,

“sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drasti-

cally. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, ﬁlter, enve-

lope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time!

■ Arpeggio Function Page 14

Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this func-

tion automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play

the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be pro-

duced by changing your ﬁngering or the arpeggio type.

■ Performance assistant technology Page 23

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect

performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do

is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the

keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in

time with the music.

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be

changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can

change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to

play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 33

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-

ering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and

much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-

iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.

092

PopBossa

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 9

Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6

About the Manuals ................................................................. 7

Included Accessories ............................................................. 7

Special Features .................................................................... 8

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements ........................................................... 10

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11

Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Front Panel .......................................................................... 12

Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios 14

Create Original Sounds 18

Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18

Using the Knobs................................................................... 21

The Easy Way to Play Piano 23

Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23

Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

—SPLIT .......................................................................... 30

Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31

Drum Kits 32

Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32

Playing Styles 33

Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33

Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38

Using Songs 39

Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40

Types of Songs .................................................................... 42

Select a Song For a Lesson 43

Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43

Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46

Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48

Play Using the Music Database 49

Change a Song’s Style 50

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50

Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50

Record Your Own Performance 52

Track Configuration.............................................................. 52

Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track

from a User Song............................................................ 55

Backup and Initialization 56

Backup ................................................................................. 56

Initialization .......................................................................... 56

Basic Operation and Displays 57

Basic Operation ................................................................... 57

Display Items ....................................................................... 59

Reference

Adding Effects 60

Harmony...............................................................................60

Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61

Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62

Handy Performance Features 63

The Metronome.................................................................... 63

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,

and the Length of Each Beat ..........................................64

Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................64

Tap Start .............................................................................. 65

Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65

Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66

Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67

One Touch Setting ...............................................................68

Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................69

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound.............................69

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70

Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................................70

Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................................72

Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................73

Loading Style Files............................................................... 74

Chord Basics........................................................................ 75

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77

Song Settings 78

Song Volume........................................................................78

A-B Repeat...........................................................................78

Muting Independent Song Parts...........................................79

Change the Melody Voice....................................................79

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80

Saving to the Registration Memory......................................80

Recalling a Registration Memory .........................................81

The Functions 82

Selecting and Setting Functions...........................................82

Connecting to a Computer 85

What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 85

Connecting a Personal Computer........................................86

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer.....87

Remote Control of MIDI Devices..........................................88

Initial Send ........................................................................... 89

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92

Important Notices about the CD-ROM .................................92

CD-ROM Contents...............................................................93

System Requirements.......................................................... 94

Software Installation............................................................. 94

Appendix

Troubleshooting................................................................. 99

Index.................................................................................. 100

Specifications................................................................... 102

Contents

10 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC

adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete

resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor

 Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the

instrument is set to Standby.

 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries

 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks ﬁrmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline

batteries are recommended.) When battery power

becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to

replace all batteries, following the precautions listed

below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are

lost when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (page 102) only. The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor

and the instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,

or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

AC adaptor

AC outlet





• Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from

the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are

installed.

NOTE

• Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument.

Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may

exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possi-

bly resulting in a loss of ﬂash memory data.

• Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining

the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may

result in heat, ﬁre and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of

six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use

different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time,

remove the batteries to prevent possible ﬂuid leakage.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to ﬂash

memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained

rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become

drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and

the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.

CAUTION

Setting Up

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 11

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

The internal speakers are automatically shut off when a

plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an exter-

nal output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT

jack to a keyboard ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape

recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the

instrument’s output signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha

FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch

sustain on and off.

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-

minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance

data and song ﬁles between the two (page 86). To use

the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-

lowing:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to con-

nect the instrument to the computer. After making

the connections, turn on the power of the instru-

ment.

• Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer.

Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on

page 94.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-

UME] control to the left and press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power. Press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-

ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be

damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external

devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

footswitch operation.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Turning the Power On

• Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument

store, computer store or electrical appliance store.

NOTE

• Even when the [] (Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” posi-

tion, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum

level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make

sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet,

and/or remove the batteries from the instrument.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message

is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory

and result in data loss.

CAUTION

12 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [] (Standby/On) switch ................. page 11

w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24

e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65

r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60

t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29

y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................... page 30

u [DEMO] button................................. page 40

i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44

o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44

!0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14

!1 [PERFORMANCE

ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23

!2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82

!3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49

!4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63

!5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button.......... page 31

!6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82

!7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons......................................pages 58, 82

!8 [SONG] button................................. page 39

!9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER]

button............................................... page 50

@0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33

@1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28

@2 Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82

@3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18

@4 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21

@5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/

[ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34

Front Panel

001

GrandPno

@3 @4

@5 @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1

i o

Song Category List

(page 41)

Style Category List

(separate Data List)

Display

(page 59)

Panel Controls and Terminals

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 13

@6 [A-B REPEAT]/

[SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71

@7 [PAUSE]/

[SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70

@8 [REW]/

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71

@9 [FF]/

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71

#0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58

#1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27

#2 REGIST MEMORY

[●] (MEMORY/BANK),

[1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80

#3 SONG MEMORY

[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52

#4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66

#5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32

#6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86

#7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11

#8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11

#9 DC IN jack ........................................ page 10

Rear Panel

• Only the following four buttons light up when selected. (Other buttons do

not light up even if selected.)

!8 [SONG] button

!9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button

@0 [STYLE] button

@1 [VOICE] button

NOTE

#6 #7 #8 #9

#2 #3

Voice Category List

(separate Data List)

Rear Panel

Music Database List

(separate Data List)

14 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Creating Arpeggios

The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by

simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you

could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and ﬁfth—and the arpeg-

gio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-

type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it

is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be

used for music production as well as performance.

Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeg-

gio function on.

● Voices and the Arpeggio Function

This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play

via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143

the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start

playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automati-

cally be turned off when you select any other voice.

If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the

arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the

arpeggio function off after selecting the voice.

● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on.

Voice No. Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name

129 Synth Sequence 137 Piano Arpeggio

130 Sawtooth Lead Arpeggio 138 Ballad Electric Piano

131 Analog Sequence 139 Guitar Chord

132 Chord Sequence 140 Guitar Arpeggio

133 Sawtooth 141 Acid Synth

134 Square Pulse 142 Arabic Loop

135 Trance 143 Massive Percussion

136 Synth Echo

001

GrandPno

The ARPEGGIO icon appears when

the arpeggio function is on.

• See “Try Playing a Variety of

Instrument Voices” on page 28.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 15

Select an arpeggio type.

The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you

select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type.

Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and

the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate

the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeg-

gio types is provided in the separate Data List.

Play the keyboard.

The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the num-

ber of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can

save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any

time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also

record your performance (page 52).

The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and

does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the

same time as the harmony function.

When you have ﬁnished playing with the arpeggio func-

tion, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off.

DownOct1

ARP Type

Hold for longer

than a second

The currently selected

arpeggio type

• Make sure that you are not

pressing any of the keyboard’s

keys while turning the arpeggio

function on or off.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

16 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Create a Pop Tune

You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your

right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds.

1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28).

For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND]

button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a

single button press.

2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1

and 2 on the preceding page).

For this example select “02 DownOct1”.

That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function.

3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function.

A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern.

Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the

display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001

8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style.

8BtModrn

001

• Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 17

4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.

When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only

for specifying accompaniment chords.

5 Press the [START/STOP] button.

The rhythm accompaniment will start.

6 Begin playing.

Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the

beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together.

The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord.

Of course you can also change your right-hand ﬁngering to produce interesting changes.

If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance

assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature

is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes!

Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand

plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the

split point. (page 30)

8BtModrn

001

The ACMP ON icon will

appear.

• Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34.

NOTE

CAm FG7sus4

Split point

18 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Create Original Sounds

The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to

add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a

variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects

can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll

explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few

tips for their use.

Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the ﬁve effect combinations provided: z →

x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display.

z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not

be affected.

v–b affect styles only.

Assigning Effects to the Knobs

001

GrandPno

The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above.

It is not possible to assign different effect combinations.

Number/Effect Knob A Knob B

z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level

c EG Attack Time Release Time

v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect–

Create Original Sounds

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 19

z Filter

Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a speciﬁed range of frequencies

to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the ﬁlter’s “cutoff” fre-

quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like

sounds.

* Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.

Some hints for using the ﬁlter effects are provided on page 22.

Knob A adjusts the ﬁlter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of

the sound.

Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the ﬁlter’s cutoff fre-

quency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff

frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the ﬁlter.

x Effect

Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while

chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect.

Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth

of the chorus effect.

Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff

Cutoff Frequency

Level

Frequencies in this

range are passed.

Frequencies in this

range are cut off.

Frequency

Resonance

Frequency

Level

Chorus Send

Level

Reverb Send

Level

Create Original Sounds

20 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

c EG (Envelope Generator)

Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over

time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower

for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sus-

tain to most ideally match the music.

Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach

maximum level when a key is played).

Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to

decay to silence after a key is released).

v Style Filter

In this case the knobs apply the ﬁlter effect to the style being played. Knob A

and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the pre-

ceding page.

b Style Tempo

Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob

clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases

the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo.

Release TimeAttack Time

AT TAC K

RELEASE

DECAY

Key Played

Sustain Level

Key Released

Time

Level

Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff

–No Effect–Tempo

Create Original Sounds

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 21

Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard.

The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when

you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice.

For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97

SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead).

Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to

select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display).

Knob A can now be used to adjust the ﬁlter cutoff frequency, and Knob

B can be used to adjust the resonance.

Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the

right).

Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can

result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level.

Using the Knobs

097

SquareLd

097

SquareLd

“z” appears here.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

Create Original Sounds

22 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the

left hand.

If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the

ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the

same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will

be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting

you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registra-

tion Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any

time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve

created (page 52).

The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects

that can be assigned to the knobs.

● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs

Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly

assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are ﬁrst

operated after the new effect has been selected.

Number/Effect Try This

z FILTER

Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (see the separate Data List for the Voice List). Turn Knob B

all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, ﬂoating 1980’s effects.

x EFFECT

Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn

Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the

Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice.

c EG

Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position.

This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys

and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces.

v STYLE FILTER

Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set

Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be

a bit mufﬂed, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.

b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 23

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature

that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even

though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any

notes and still sound good!

So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can

have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!

Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The P.A.T. icon will appear after “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT”.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be dis-

played. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a differ-

ent song.

For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”.

Play with Both Hands

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/

OFF] button to turn the function on or off.

Icon will appear when performance

assistant technology is on.

011

Nocturne

010

AveMaria

The song displayed here

will be played.

Song number

Song name

The Easy Way to Play Piano

24 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing

the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ﬁfth measure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both

hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G,

C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes

will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right.

Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to

“correct” the notes that you play.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

● What is a “Song”?

Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this

instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of

music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with

a range of other functions (page 39).

Adjusts volume.

Before After

The Easy Way to Play Piano

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 25

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to

turn the performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Ave Maria is provided in the separate Data List.

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands

spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alter-

nately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where

you play thanks to performance assistant technology!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways

of playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and

a melody with your right ... or any other combination.

To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a

style with auto accompaniment on.

If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59).

You will get even better

results if you match your

left-hand rhythm to the

rhythm of the chord indica-

tor in the display.

Sounds like you’re

playing the right

notes!

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

● Play alternately with the left and

right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index ﬁnger

→

middle ﬁnger

→

ring ﬁnger).

Play 3 notes at once with

your right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

26 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.

The procedure is that same as that described for playing

Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”.

Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the

ninth measure.

Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with

your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds.

When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way

to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to

turn the performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Nocturne is provided in the separate Data List.

011

Nocturne

The Easy Way to Play Piano

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 27

When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is

too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The

tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons

to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.

● About the Beat Display

The arrow marks in the beat display ﬂash in time with the rhythm of the song or style.

Change the Song Tempo

Current tempo value

090

Tempo

Second beat Fourth beat

First beat of measure Third beat

28 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,

strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide

variety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The voice number and name will be displayed.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available

voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected

here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “092 Flute” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

001

GrandPno

Voice number

Voice name

Appears when the Voice mode

is engaged.

•You can also select the voice

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons after pressing the

[VOICE] button. (page 58)

NOTE

092

Flute

Select 092 Flute

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 29

You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.

The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.

The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.

When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when

you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

“D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected dual voice will be displayed.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice.

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

• The dual voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Dual voice icon

•You can also select the Dual

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“D.Voice” item.

NOTE

D.Voice

Hold for longer

than a second

110

Marimba

The currently selected

dual voice

109

Vibes

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

30 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.

In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main

and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split

point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72).

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.

The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off.

When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

“S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected split voice will be displayed.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Two voices will sound at the same time.

Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice

Split point

• The split voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Split voice icon

•You can also select the Split

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“S.Voice” item.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

042

FngrBass

S.Voice

The currently selected

SPLIT voice

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 31

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example

try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

Play the Grand Piano Voice

033

Folk Gtr

• When you press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button all settings

other than touch sensitivity are

turned off. The dual and split

voices will also be turned off, so

only the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire keyboard.

NOTE

32 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kits

This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects

you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet ﬂy-bys,

eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to

enhance the mood at parties.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments.

When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly

from the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

Select the desired Drum kit.

Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128 by rotating the dial.

* When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key.

Try out each key.

You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive

variety of drum and percussion sounds.

Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be

found in the Drum Kit List in the separate Data List.

● Drum Kit List

Select and Play the Drum Kit

117 Standard Kit 1 121 Electronic Kit 125 Brush Kit

118 Standard Kit 2 122 Analog Kit 126 Symphony Kit

119 Room Kit 123 Dance Kit 127 SFX Kit 1

120 Rock Kit 124 Jazz Kit 128 SFX Kit 2

Ride Cymbal 1

Tambourine

Cowbell

Vibraslap

Bongo L

Hi-Hat Open

Crash Cymbal 1

Hand Clap

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

Open Rim Shot

Side Stick

Castanet

Sticks

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Conga H Open

Timbale L

Agogo L

Maracas

Guiro Short

Claves

Cuica Mute

Tr ia ngle Mute

Shaker

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Splash Cymbal

Crash Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Conga H Mute

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Snare Tight

Floor Tom L

Low Tom

Floor Tom H

Kick Tight

Kick

Snare

Snare Roll

Snare Soft

Kick Soft

Seq Click H

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

Conga L

Timbale H

Agogo H

Cabasa

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

Guiro Long

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Cuica Open

Tr iangle Open

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

117

Std.Kit1

Example: 117 Standard Kit 1

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 33

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces

accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to

match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 155 dif-

ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures

(see the separate Data List for a complete list of the available styles).

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro

trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played

using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style number and name will appear in the display.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided in the separate Data List.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

001

8BtModrn

Style Number

Style Name

This icon appears when a style

number and name is displayed.

• An external style ﬁle loaded to

style number 156 can be

selected and used in the same

way as the internal styles. The

style ﬁle must be loaded to style

number 156 after transferring it

to the instrument from a com-

puter. For details, refer to the

section “Loading Style Files” on

page 74.

NOTE

092

PopBossa

• Style numbers 131, 143–155

have no rhythm part and there-

fore no rhythm will play if you

use them for the above exam-

ple. For these styles ﬁrst turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 34, press the

[START/STOP] button, and the

accompaniment bass and chord

parts will begin playing when

you play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Playing Styles

34 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-

paniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment

off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a

style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard

split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function

off.

Play Along with a Style

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the

accompaniment chords.

This icon appears when auto-

matic accompaniment is on.

092

PopBossa

• The keyboard split point can be

changed as required: refer to

page 72.

NOTE

Split point (54 : F#2)

Auto accompani-

ment region

Flashes when sync

start is on.

092

PopBossa

Playing Styles

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 35

Play a left-hand chord to start the style.

You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.

This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-

ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.

The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you

play.

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody

with your right hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback

when you’re done.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70.

Try this!

Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36.

These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord

progressions sound good with the styles.

Auto accompani-

ment region

Split point

Auto accompani-

ment region

Split point

Playing Styles

36 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords

Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.

In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord

sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different ﬁngerings of the same

chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge inﬂuence on the overall

feel of the music you play.

On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital

to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take

your accompaniments to a new level.

On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the

instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively

creating a complete song.

■ Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Play the scores with the left hand.

Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34.

* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simpliﬁed scores that indicate which notes to play to

produce the chord progressions.

—Dance music with simple chords—

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start

again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.

Recommended Style

031 Euro Trance

Play to the left of the split point.

Split point

C G Am

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 37

—3-chord boogie-woogie—

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the

progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!

—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—

This progression includes jazzy “two-ﬁve” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When

you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Recommended Style

148 Piano Boogie

Recommended Style

091 Bossa Nova

C C

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Dm CM7

Am A7

FM7

Bm7

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

38 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:

● Easy Chords

● Standard Chords

The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of

the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in

this area of the keyboard.

■ Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard using only

one, two, or three ﬁngers.

■ Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you produce accompaniment by

playing chords using normal ﬁngerings in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords

DEFGABCDEF

Split point (default: 54/F#2)

Root notes and the corresponding keys

Accompaniment

range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of the chord.

Cm7

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest black key to the left of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white key to the left of it.

•To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white and black keys to the left

of it (three keys altogether).

( )

CmM7

CM7

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

Cdim

Cdim7

CmM7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

(

)

(

b13

)

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords

will be recognized without them.

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 39

Using Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a

piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,

or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the

performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The

songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and brieﬂy

describe the 30 songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button.

The song number and name will be displayed.

You can use the dial to select a different song.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Select and Listen to a Song

Listen Lesson Record

Song

011

Nocturne

The currently selected song

and number are displayed

•You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself (User

Songs) or songs that have been

transferred to the instrument

from a computer in the same

way that you play the internal

songs.

NOTE

012

ForElise

The song displayed here

can be played

Using Songs

40 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

001–030 Built in Songs (see next page)

031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91)

● Using the [DEMO] button

Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback

will continue repeatedly starting again from the ﬁrst Song (001).

You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the

[DEMO] button.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button.

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

Song start!

PAUSE

Press the pause but-

ton to pause playback.

REW

Press the fast reverse

button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the song.

Press the fast forward

button to rapidly skip

ahead to a later point

in the song.

• When an A-B repeat range is

speciﬁed the fast reverse and

forward function will only work

within that range.

NOTE

Using Songs

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 41

● Song List

These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature,

songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-

gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.

: Includes chord data.

The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 30 and song 20 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book

on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in the separate Data List.

Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same

as the original.

Category No. Name Suggested Uses

Main Demo

1 Groove It The songs in this category have been created to

give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of

this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for

use with the performance assistant technology

feature.

2 Winter Serenade

3 Synth Zone

Voice Demo

4Grand Piano Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s

many useful voices. They make maximum use of

the characteristics of each voice, and might serve

as inspiration for your own compositions.

5Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo

6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo

8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo

Function Demo

9 Hallelujah Chorus

Use these songs to experience some of the

instrument’s advanced features: song number 9

for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11

for the performance assistant technology feature.

10 Ave Maria

11 Nocturne op.9-2

Piano Solo

12 For Elise

These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use

as lesson songs.

13 Maple Leaf Rag

14 The Last Rose of Summer

Piano Ensemble

15 Amazing Grace

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also

well suited for use as lesson songs.

16 Die Lorelei

17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

18 Scarborough Fair

19 Old Folks at Home

Piano Accompaniment

Ac Ballad

(Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)

When you need to practice backing

(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to

do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited

to play with a band. These songs allow you to

practice backing parts one hand at a time, which

can be the easiest way to master this important

skill.

21 Ep Ballad

22 Boogie Woogie

23 Rock Piano

24 Salsa

25 Country Piano

26 Gospel R&B

27 Medium Swing

28 Jazz Waltz

29 Medium Bossa

30 SlowRock

CHORD

Using Songs

42 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

The following three types of songs can be used.

● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.

● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.

● External song ﬁles (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.

* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to

transfer the songs to the instrument.

The chart below shows the basic processes ﬂow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song

ﬁles—from storage to playback.

Types of Songs

Transfer

(page 90)

Record

(page 52)

Your own performance

Song Storage locations

in the instrument

Preset Songs

(001–030)

User Songs

(031–035)

Flash Memory

(036–)

The 30 songs built

into the instru-

ment.

Stored in the inter-

nal ﬂash memory.

Save to internal

ﬂash memory. Cur-

rently available.

Play

External song ﬁles

can be saved to ﬂash

memory (036–).

• Different ﬂash memory areas

are used to store user songs

and external song ﬁles trans-

ferred from a computer. User

songs cannot be directly trans-

ferred to the external song ﬁle

ﬂash memory area, and vice

versa.

NOTE

Computer

External song ﬁle

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 43

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or

both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) down-

loaded from the Internet and saved to ﬂash memory. (pages 89–91) Dur-

ing the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play

wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle.

It’s never too late to start learning!

Lesson Flow:

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!

The practice methods:

● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.

● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct tim-

ing.

● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing

along with the song.

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you

play the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want

to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song

types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”.

Lesson 1—Waiting

Select the

song you want

to learn.

Select the part you want

to work on (right hand,

left hand, both hands).

Select lesson

1, 2, or 3.

Lesson

start!

• Song numbers 10 and 11 are

function demos for perfor-

mance assistant. The lesson

function cannot be used with

them..

NOTE

012

ForElise

Select a Song For a Lesson

44 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Select the part you want to practice.

Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in

sequence: right hand → left hand → both hands → right hand ....

The currently selected part is shown in the display.

Start Lesson 1.

Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the

LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in

sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The

currently selected mode is shown in the display.

Right

Left

BothHand

Right-hand lesson

Left-hand lesson

Both-hands lesson

Waiting

YourTemp

MinusOne

012

ForElise

(Lesson 1)

(Lesson 2)

(Lesson 3)

(Song Lesson off)

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.

Select a Song For a Lesson

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 45

Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the

next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the

correct note.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

■ See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again

from the beginning.

007

Waiting

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

In this case “

r1” indicate that right-hand

lesson 1 has been selected.

~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent

Very Good

Good

When the lesson song has played all the way through your

performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.

• The evaluation feature can be

turned off via the FUNCTION

Grade item (page 84).

NOTE

Select a Song For a Lesson

46 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed

you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own

pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 2.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct

timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo

will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original

tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

YourTemp

In this case “r2” indicate that right-

hand lesson 2 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 47

Here’s where you can perfect your technique.

The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening

to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 3.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Lesson 3—Minus One

MinusOne

In this case “r3” indicate that right-

hand lesson 3 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

48 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to

repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult.

Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a les-

son.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at

which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-

sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you

pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back

four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat,

so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button

when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until

you get it right.

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

•You can change the number of

measures the Repeat and learn

function jumps back by pressing

a number button [1]–[9] during

repeat playback.

NOTE

Press immediately

Oops!

A mistake!

e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback

Song playback

direction

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 49

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to

select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...

simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel

settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of

sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List in the separate

Data List, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that

matches the image of the song you intend to play.

For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your

right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the

left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about

playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

001

AlvFever

124

DayOfW&R

Split Point

50 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style

to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that

you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa

nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrange-

ments by changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice

for a complete change of image.

The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah

Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button

to play it.

As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the

song remains the same.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other

songs as well—any songs that include chord data.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to

select a different song.

Select a Song.

Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger

Using the Easy Song Arranger

009

Halleluj

009

Halleluj

The currently selected song number

and name are displayed here.

Change a Song’s Style

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 51

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move

on to the next step while the song is playing.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The style number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to

select a different style.

Select a style.

Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.

As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only

the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to

the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the

song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button).

Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.

Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and

name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice.

Change the song’s melody voice.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After

SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected

in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice.

• When playing song numbers

010, 011 and 020 to 030 while

using the Easy Song Arranger,

melody tracks will be automati-

cally muted and no melody will

sound. In order to hear the mel-

ody tracks you will need to

press the SONG MEMORY but-

tons [3] to [5].

NOTE

Song start!

015

PopShf 1

The currently selected style number

and name are displayed here.

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by playing

in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/

OFF] button will not function.

• If the time signature of the song

and style are different, the time

signature of the song will be

used.

NOTE

001

GrandPno

The currently selected voice number

and name are displayed here.

Hold for longer than a second

SONG MEL

52 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as

user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on

the instrument.

■ Recordable Data

You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.

Each track can be recorded individually.

● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts.

● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part.

To record your own performance, ﬁrst use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the

track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the

user song number (031–035) you want to record to.

Track Configuration

Recording Procedure

• Up to approximately 10,000

notes can be recorded if you

record only to the melody

tracks. Up to approximately

5,500 chord changes can be

recorded if you record only to

the style track.

NOTE

• The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L …

Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accom-

paniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand

part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for

both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody

part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the mel-

ody part played by the left hand.

NOTE

• Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody

part (MELODY R)

• Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody

part (MELODY L)

• Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” perfor-

mance data.

• Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accom-

paniment) part.

Melody Chords

Specify

track(s) and

record

Tra ck

Right-hand

melody

Left-hand

melody

Other perfor-

mance data

Style

The parts played by each track

when a user song is played back.

031

User 1

Rotate the dial to select a song

number between 031 and 035.

Record Your Own Performance

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 53

Select the track(s) you want to record to and conﬁrm your

selection on the display.

◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track

Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will ﬂash in the display.

◆ Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

The selected track will ﬂash in the display.

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]

button.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a

second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off

while recording is in progress.

• Style accompaniment is auto-

matically turned on when you

select the style track [A] for

recording.

• Style accompaniment cannot

turned on or off while recording

is in progress.

• If you use a split voice for

recording, notes played to the

left of the split point will not be

recorded.

NOTE

• If you record to a track that

contains previously-recorded

data the previous data will be

overwritten and lost.

CAUTION

Press and hold

rEC

User 1

001

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet been

recorded, the style track [A] will

automatically be selected for

recording when a melody track

is selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be sure

to turn the style track [A] off.

NOTE

rEC

User 1

001

• If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording a warning mes-

sage will appear and recording

will stop automatically. Use the

song clear or track clear (page

55) function to delete unwanted

data and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do the

recording again.

NOTE

Recording

starts

Current measure

rEC

User 1

003

Record Your Own Performance

54 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style

track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will

stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to

001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light.

When the recording is done ...

◆ To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39).

1 Press the [SONG] button.

2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial

to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

● To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],

[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded

tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute

previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)

while recording new tracks.

● To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

● Data Recording Limitations

• The split voice cannot be recorded.

• The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,

tempo

Record Your Own Performance

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 55

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer

than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the song is being cleared.

This function lets you delete a speciﬁed track from a user song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],

[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the track is being cleared.

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

• If you only want to clear a spe-

ciﬁc track from a user song use

the Track Clear function.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

Press and hold

YES

ClrUser1

•To execute the Song Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Song Clear

operation.

NOTE

YES

ClrTr1

Hold for longer than a second

•To execute the Track Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Track Clear

operation.

NOTE

56 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.

If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default set-

tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

■ Backup Clear● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory—panel user setting, reg-

istration memory, user songs, style ﬁle 156—turn the power on by pressing

the

[] (Standby/On)

switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.

The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.

■ Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear song data and style ﬁles that have been transferred to the internal ﬂash

memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing

the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard

and the three highest black keys.

Backup

● The Backup Parameters

• User Songs

• Style Files

•Touch Response on/off

•Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel,

Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity

Initialization

• When you execute the Flash

Clear operation, song data

you have purchased will also

be cleared. Be sure to save

data you want to keep to a

computer.

CAUTION

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 57

Overall control of the instrument is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

Basic Operation

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

001

GrandPno

Display (page 59)

● Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the

instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones

plugged into the PHONES jack.

Rotate counter-

clockwise to lower

the volume.

Rotate clockwise

to increase the

volume.

3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to

some buttons indicates that the button can be

pressed and held for longer than a second to

call up a related function. This provides conve-

nient direct access to a range of functions.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Basic Operation and Displays

58 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can

then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.

■ Changing Values● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]

button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

012

ForElise

This portion of the display indi-

cates the name and number of

the currently selected song,

voice and style. It also displays

the name and current setting/

value of other functions.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the

value of the selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate

the dial continuously to continuously

increase or decrease the value.

● [+] and [-] Buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to incre-

ment the value by 1, or press the [-]

button brieﬂy to decrement the value

by 1. Press and hold either button to

continuously increment or decre-

ment the value in the corresponding

direction.

● Number Buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number

or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below).

Decrease Increase

Press

brieﬂy to

decrement.

Press

brieﬂy to

increment.

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

Example: Song number “003”

can be entered in three ways.

• [0] → [0] → [3]

• [0] → [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

• [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

When selecting a song, style, or voice,

you can use these buttons to jump to the

ﬁrst item in the next or previous category.

The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

are useful for selecting categorized items,

as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT

In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you

ﬁrst use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the cat-

egory containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-]

buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when

you have to select from a large number of voices.

Jump to the

ﬁrst item in

the next or

category.

090

SweetFlt

The ﬁrst voice in the selected

category is selected.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Basic Operation and Displays

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 59

The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

Display Items

001

GrandPno

Indicates that Touch response

is turned on. (see page 65)

Indicates that Harmony is

turned on. (see page 60)

Indicates that the Dual voice is

turned on. (see page 29)

Indicates that the Split voice is

turned on. (see page 30)

Indicates that the Arpeggio is

turned on. (see page 14)

Indicates that performance

assistant technology is turned

on. (see

page 23)

Indicates that Accompaniment

is turned on. (see page 34)

Indicates that SYNC STOP is

turned on. (see page 71)

TOUCH

HARMONY

DUAL

SPLIT

ARPEGGIO

Performance assistant technology

ACMP ON

SYNC STOP

Displays the melody and chord

notes of a song when the Song

Lesson function is in use, or the

notes of chords you specify when

the Dictionary function is in use. At

other times the notes you play on

the keyboard are displayed.

Notation

•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indi-

cated by “8va” in the notation.

•For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be shown in

the notation section of the display. This is due to space

limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the beat number in a mea-

sure during the Metronome function.

Indicates the current measure dur-

ing playback of a song or style, and

the currently set Tempo value for the

song or style. (see page 27)

Indicates the name of the chord cur-

rently being played back, or the

name of the chord being played on

the keyboard.

Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see

page 52, 79)

BEAT number and MEASURE

Chord Display

Song Track Display

001

Indicates the current style or song

beat with ﬂashing arrows. (see page

27)

This display allows you to visually

conﬁrm parameters assigned to the

knobs. (see page 18)

Beat Display

Knob Assign Display

60 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF]

button to turn this feature on, the appropriate

harmony type for the currently selected main

voice is automatically selected.

Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the Harmony Type item appears.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected harmony

type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a

different harmony type.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate

Data List for information about the available

harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with

the harmony function. The effect and operation

of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the

below section “How to sound each Harmony

Type” as well as the Effect Type List for

details.

Harmony

When harmony is on the

harmony icon will appear

in the display.

Trio

HarmType

The currently selected harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual

or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony

notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when

the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34).

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the

Function Settings (page 69).

Keep holding down the keys.

Reference

Adding Effects

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 61

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum

reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the

procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Reverb Type item.

“Reverb” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected reverb type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate

Data List for information about the available

reverb types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 83.)

Adding Reverb

100

StyleVol

Hall2

The currently selected reverb type

Reverb

Hall3

Selected reverb type

62 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Chorus Type item.

“Chorus” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected chorus type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate

Data List for information about the available

chorus types.

● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of chorus

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 83.)

Adding Chorus

Chorus1

Chorus

The currently selected chorus type

Chorus2

Selected chorus type

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 63

Handy Performance Features

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature.

Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.

■ Start the metronome● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Turn the metronome on and start it by

pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF]

button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-

NOME ON/OFF] button again.

■ Adjusting the Metronome

Tempo

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the tempo setting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to

280.

The Metronome

001

GrandPno

Indicates the beat number

in the measure

090

Tempo

Current Tempo setting

64 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second to

select the number of beats per measure

function “TimesigN”.

Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each

measure while the other beats will click. All

beats will simply click with no chime at the

beginning of each measure if you set this

parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60.

Select 5 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the beat length function

“TimesigD”.

The currently selected beat length will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,

or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or

note). Select 8 for this example.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Metronome Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume as required.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

Number of beats per measure.

TimesigN

Hold for longer than

a second.

• The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song

that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style

or song is playing.

NOTE

TimesigD

The length of one beat.

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Metronome

volume

100

MtrVol

Handy Performance Features

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 65

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at

any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/

song will begin playing at the tapped tempo.

When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to

turn touch response on.

The touch response icon will appear in the dis-

play when touch response is on (page 59).

Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF]

button for longer than a second so that

the Touch Sensitivity item appears.

“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected touch sensi-

tivity will be displayed.

Use the dial in response to keyboard

dynamics to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynam-

ics—i.e. greater sensitivity.

Tap Start

Touch Response Sensitivity

001

GrandPno

Touch response icon

TouchSns

Hold for longer

than a second.

Touch Sensitivity

Medium

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

66 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll

the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice

such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects.

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone

increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent

increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Pitch Bend

Pitch Controls

Transpos

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

000

Tuning

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 67

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the arpeggio velocity function

“ARP Velo”.

“ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected arpeg-

gio velocity setting will appear.

Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.

When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-

ume is the same regardless of changes in key-

board velocity.

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics

Original

The currently selected

arpeggio velocity.

ARP Velo

68 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select

voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2

on page 28).

Select and play back any song (steps 1

to 3 on page 39).

Play the keyboard and remember the

sound of the voice.

If you have stopped playback at some point

during this procedure press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback again.

Use the dial to change songs, then play

the keyboard and listen to the voice.

You should hear a different keyboard voice

than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE]

button after changing songs to see the name of

the voice being used.

One Touch Setting

000

SweetSpr

Use the dial to select voice number 000.

Handy Performance Features

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 69

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Harmony Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the harmony volume

between 000 and 127.

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external

speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“MasterEQ”.

“MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected EQ

type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and

2 are best for listening via the instrument’s

built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,

and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via

external speakers.

Adjusting the Harmony Volume

080

HarmVol

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound

Speakerl

MasterEQ

The currently selected

master EQ type.

70 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.

This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the

accompaniment to match the song you are playing.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main sec-

tion. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indeﬁnitely

until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style

playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.

The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Main A/BIntro

Auto ﬁllEnding

Appears when Auto

Accompaniment is on.

● Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,

style playback will begin as soon as you play a

chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode

by pressing the [SYNC START] button again.

Beat arrows will ﬂash when

the synchro start standby

mode is engaged

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 71

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as

shown below). For information on how to enter

chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment

Chords” on page 38.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompa-

niment stops automatically. You can have the

ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

again while the ending is playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—

MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.

INTRO≥A

Accompaniment

range

Split point

FILL A≥B

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords

in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC

STOP] button.

ENDING

Appears when the syn-

chro-stop function is

engaged.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

72 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the

procedure described below.

Press the [STYLE] button.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for

longer than a second so that the Split

point item appears.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 000 through 127.

Adjusting the Style Volume

100

StyleVol

Setting the Split Point

054

SplitPnt

Hold for longer than a second

Split point

Split point (54 : F#2)

Main voice

Split voice

• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point

also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

NOTE

•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the

item (page 82).

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 73

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 38).

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function, then press the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-

ment on.

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

092

PopBossa

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompaniment

range

74 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

This instrument features 155 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and

others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” sufﬁx), can be loaded into style

number 156 and used in the same way as the internal styles.

In order to use the style ﬁle load function, the ﬁle must already have been transferred from the computer to

the instrument. The procedure for transferring ﬁles from a computer to the instrument is described on page

89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).

The procedure described below loads a style ﬁle that has already been transferred from a computer to the

instrument into style number 156.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the style ﬁle load function “Sff

Load”.

After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable

style ﬁle will appear in the display.

If multiple loadable style ﬁles have been trans-

ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or

the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other ﬁles in

sequence.

Execute the load operation.

With the name of the style ﬁle you want to load

shown in the display, press the number [0] but-

ton.

A conﬁrmation message for the load

operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]

button to actually load the ﬁle.

Loading Style Files

Sff Load

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 75

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,

for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the

C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for

the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and

anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad

is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-

tional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create

different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by

choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord

(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the

chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a

major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

76 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

■ Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C

(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

(9)

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

(#11)

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm

(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

(9)

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 C *

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions

can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2.

NOTE

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the

notes shown in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 77

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the LESSON [START]

button for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the speciﬁed chord (root note and

chord type) are shown in the display,

both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord,

press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display ﬂash.

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Dict.

Hold for longer than

a second

001

Dict.

001

Dict.

Notation of chord

Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only

by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when

specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

NOTE

78 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the

start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the song (page 39) and press the

[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning

of the section you want to repeat (the

“A” point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Song Volume

100

SongVol

Song volume

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

NOTE

A-B Repeat

• The repeat start and end points can be speciﬁed in one-measure

increments.

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song

press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.

NOTE

Song Settings

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 79

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted

part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute

tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.

Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons

to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The

track number in the display disappears when that

track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information

about the song track conﬁguration.

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.

Select the song and play it.

Rotate the dial to select the voice you

want to listen to after pressing the

[VOICE] button.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the

display for a few seconds, indicating

that the voice selected in step #2 has

replaced the song’s original melody

voice.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number on—Track will playback

Track number off—Track is muted or

contains no data

Change the Melody Voice

•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.

NOTE

050

Strings

SONG MEL

Hold for longer than

a second

80 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of two setups each).

Set the panel controls as required—

select a voice, accompaniment style,

etc.

Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button.

A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a bank number from 1 to

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]

button while holding the [●] (MEMORY/

BANK) button to store the current panel

settings to the speciﬁed registration

memory.

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 16 presets (eight

banks of two each) can be

memorized.

Memory 2

Saving to the Registration Memory

Bank

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-

back.

NOTE

Writing!

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains

data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 81

Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button.

A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select bank you want to recall.

Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]

or [2], containing the settings you want

to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY

number appears in the display for a few

seconds. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

Bank

REGIST 1

● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-

tion Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),

Style Volume, Tempo

• Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time,

Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance,

Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings

(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave,

Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,

Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter

Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,

Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type

• Arpeggio settings

Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume

• Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when

using the Song features.

82 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 83.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s

display name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/

OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will

cancel the selection.

Some function settings are stored in memory as

soon as they are changed. See “The Backup

Parameters” on page 56 for information on the

function settings that are stored on the instru-

ment. To restore all initial factor default set-

tings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure

described in the “Initialization” section on page

56.

Selecting and Setting Functions

100

StyleVol

Transpos

The selected function.

Direct numeric

entry.

• Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

The Functions

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 83

● Function Setting List

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point SplitPnt

000–127

(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—

in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)

voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are

automatically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1(Soft),

2(Medium),

3(Hard)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the

feature.

Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Voice Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time.

Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time.

Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Main Voice Filter

Resonance

M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter resonance.

Dual Voice D.Voice 001–504 Selects the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time.

Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time.

Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Dual Voice Filter

Resonance

D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter resonance.

Split Voice S.Voice 001–504 Selects the Split voice.

Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Voice Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

84 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is

Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

Reverb Type Reverb 01–10

Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list in the

separate Data List.)

Chorus Type Chorus 01–05

Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list in the

separate Data List.)

Master EQ Type MasterEQ

Speaker1,

Speaker2,

Headphone,

Line Out1,

Line Out2

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in

different listening situations.

Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list in the separate Data List.)

Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–50 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14)

Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo

1 (Original),

2 (Thru)

Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.

Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style ﬁle.

PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88).

Local On/Off Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87)

External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock

(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87)

Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is

transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out SongOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Send InitSend YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to

send, or press [-] to cancel.

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note,

Quarter note,

Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson Track (R) R-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a

computer.

Lesson Track (L) L-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting

is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.

Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to

ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 85

Connecting to a Computer

Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers,

sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide stan-

dard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Natu-

rally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as

well as the songs, styles and panel settings.

The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is

enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI

data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the speciﬁc MIDI functions pro-

vided by this instrument.

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic

instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world

today, these are the two main categories of instru-

ments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical

guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They

are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a

key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a

string and the note sounds. But how does a digital

instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampling note (previously recorded

note) stored in the tone generator section (elec-

tronic circuit) is played based on information

received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the

basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the instrument.

Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a reso-

nated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what

voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”,

“when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”.

Then each piece of information is changed into a

number value and sent to the tone generator. Using

these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays

the stored sampling note.

Example of Keyboard Information

Your keyboard performance and all panel opera-

tions of this instrument are processed as MIDI

data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and

User songs are also made up of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instru-

ment Digital Interface and it allows different musi-

cal instruments and devices to instantly

communicate with each other, via digital data. The

MIDI standard is used all over the world and was

designed to transmit performance data between

electronic musical instruments (or computers).

Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument

from another and transmit performance data

between the devices-taking your creative and per-

formance potential to even higher levels.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:

Channel messages and System messages.

What Is MIDI?

● Acoustic guitar note production

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

● Digital instrument note production

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note

stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.

Playing the keyboard

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

Sampling

Note

Sampling

Note

Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

86 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

● Channel Messages

This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI

channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up

to sixteen different instruments at the same time.

Channel messages transmit information such as

Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16

channels.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire

MIDI system. System messages include messages

like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique

to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime

Messages that control the MIDI device.

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-

puter.

The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.

Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on

page 92.

Connect the USB terminal of the computer

to the USB terminal on the instrument using

a standard USB cable (USB cable sold sep-

arately).

The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft

Downloader application that allows you to transfer

song ﬁles from your computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory. For instructions about how to install

Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song

ﬁles, see page 90.

■ Precautions when using the [USB] termi-

nal

When connecting the computer to the [USB] termi-

nal, make sure to observe the following points.

Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and

corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the

instrument freezes, restart the application software

or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instru-

ment off then on again.

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF

Performance data of the keyboard (contains

note number and velocity data)

Program Change

Instrument selection (including bank select

MSB/LSB, if necessary)

Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.)

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Start/stop operation

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

Instrument

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB] terminal, exit from

any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended,

sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-

puter to the [USB] terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument

on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB]

terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play notes on the

keyboard or play back a song, etc.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when

turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when

alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

CAUTION

• The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the

instrument in the following cases:

• During style playback.

• During song playback.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 87

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer,

it transmits/receives performance data.

■ MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

USB cable

USB terminalUSB terminal

Instrument

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, the most likely

cause is that Local Control has been set to off.

CAUTION

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from

an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will

not start.

CAUTION

88 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

■ PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

song or backup ﬁles between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO] button for

longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on

your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the

panel.

■ Remote control keys● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To use the remote control functions, simulta-

neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-

board (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key

(shown below).

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

oFF

PC mode

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 82).

NOTE

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

C#1

C6: Fast forward

B5: Start

A5: Stop

G5: Rewind

F5: Top (move to the beginning

of the song)

E5: Metronome ON/OFF

• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2

mode.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 89

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the

70 MIDI songs and 5 Style ﬁles provided on the

CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument.

Backup ﬁles can also be transferred from the

instrument to the computer and back. Songs and

styles transferred to the instrument can be used

with the instrument’s lesson and other functions.

In order to transfer songs between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the

Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-

ROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation

details.

■ With the Musicsoft

Downloader You Can:

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded

from the Internet or created on your computer

from the computer to the instrument’s ﬂash

memory.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 90.

The procedure for transferring songs included

on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-

puter to the instrument is given as an example.

Initial Send

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

• Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs

(Song 036–)

• Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb

• Data Format: SMF format 0,

style ﬁle (extension: .sty),

Backup File (06PK61.BUP)

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence data. There are

two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large

number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF

Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

90 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

● Backup ﬁles can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 91.

■ Use Musicsoft Downloader

To Transfer Songs From the

Accessory CD-ROM To the

Instrument’s ﬂash memory

● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 94).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader

application and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-

down menu that appears. Double-click the

“SampleData” Folder on the window. Select

the ﬁle from the speciﬁc “SongData” folder

you want to transfer to the instrument, and

click “Open”.

A copy of the selected MIDI song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at

the bottom of the window to specify the desti-

nation for the transfer. Click the “Electronic

Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash mem-

ory.”

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily”, click the

downward [Move] button and a conﬁr-

mation message will appear. Click [OK]

and the song will be transferred from

the “List of ﬁles stored temporarily” to

the instrument’s memory.

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click the CD-ROM drive

w Double-click “SampleData” Folder

→ “SongData” Folder, and click the

desired song ﬁle.

e Click “Open”

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

Connecting to a Computer

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 91

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in ﬂash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

Style ﬁles (ﬁles with the “.STY” extension) can

be transferred to Flash memory using the same

procedure as described above. Style ﬁles trans-

ferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into

style number 156 and then played (page 74).

■ Transfer a backup ﬁle from

the instrument to a computer

● ● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56),

including the ﬁve User Songs stored on the instru-

ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-

cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader

display, and then “System Drive”, a ﬁle named

“06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right cor-

ner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is

the backup ﬁle. For details about how to transmit

backup ﬁle using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation, refer to the Online help in the application.

● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)

transferred from a computer for lessons it is

necessary to specify which channels are to be

played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in ﬂash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand

part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred

from your computer.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only

will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the

memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-

appear completely when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a

copy of all important data stored on your computer.

•We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than bat-

teries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the

batteries fail during the transfer.

CAUTION

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User Songs is transmitted/

received as a single ﬁle. As a result, all backup data will be over-

written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the computer. If you do so, it will

not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

92 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon

breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on page 98

before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-

not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).

Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different

from the screens which appear on your computer.

• Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and

download the latest version of the software from the following site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

● Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions.

● Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other than a

computer. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause

hearing damage or damage your equipment.

CAUTION

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 93

When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear

automatically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and dou-

ble click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.)

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website.

CD-ROM Contents

Folder Name

Application / Data Name

Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet

and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.

Refer to page 96 for installation instructions.

USBdrv32_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 32-bit version Windows

2000/XP/Vista/7)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer

via USB.

Refer to page 94 for installation instructions.

USBdrv64_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 64-bit version

Windows XP/Vista/7)

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as

well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs

1–11, 30 and song 20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are

provided in the separate Data List.

SampleData

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs, styles, or data* can be transferred to the instrument and

played or used with the instrument’s functions.

* This instrument does not support Music Database data.

StyleData 5 style ﬁles

MDB 5 Music Database data

94 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

If you have any problems with the installation,

refer to the troubleshooting section on page 96.

■

Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI

Driver

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

In order to be able to communicate with and use

MIDI instruments connected to your computer, the

appropriate driver software must be properly

installed on your computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software

and similar applications on your computer to trans-

mit and receive MIDI data to and from instruments

via a USB cable.

Follow the steps below to install (or update) the

USB-MIDI driver.

Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and computer

keyboard.

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are open.

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

Turn off the power of the instrument.

Connect the USB connector of the com-

puter to the USB terminal of the MIDI

instrument with a standard USB cable.

Turn on the power of the instrument(s).

When the “Found New Hardware Wizard”

window appears, click [Cancel].

System Requirements

Data OS Computer Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft Downloader

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

Windows 7

233 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium/Celeron

Processor family

(500 MHz or higher is

recommended)

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

128 MB or more (at

least 512 MB of free

space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver for Windows

Windows XP Professional

(SP2/SP3)/XP Home

Edition (SP2/SP3)/2000

(SP4)

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

10 MB or more —

Windows XP Professional

x64 Edition (SP2)

Intel 64 compatible

processor

256 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/

SP2)

800 MHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor or Intel 64

compatible processor

512 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows 7

1.4 GHz or higher; Intel

Core/Pentium/Celeron

processor or Intel 64

compatible processor

1 GB or more

(32-bit)/2 GB or

more (64-bit)

10 MB or more —

Software Installation

Driver

USB

Cable

MIDI instrument

Computer

Sequence

software

• Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB devices.

NOTE

• If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB connection at

the same time, connect all the instruments to the computer and turn

on the power for all of them, then perform the following installation

procedure.

NOTE

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen

appears.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 95

Open the following folder from the CD-

ROM drive in your “My Computer” folder,

and double click “setup.exe.”

•For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/

Vista/7: “USBdrv32_”

•For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7:

“USBdrv64_”

*Select [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [System] to

check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition” appears

on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on the 32 bit

version.)

When the “File Download” window

appears, click [Run] or [Open].

The “Preparing to install” window appears. The

next window will appear after ﬁnishing this prep-

aration.

When the “Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver”

window appears, click [Next].

If the warning message below appears during the

installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or

[Install].

When a message appears indicating

that the driver has been successfully

installed, click [Finish].

When a window appears prompting you

to restart the computer, do so.

Restart the computer by following the on-screen

directions.

• This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the message

“Device driver software was not successfully installed.” appears,

continue the installation procedure.

NOTE

• This screen will not appear if you are updating the USB-MIDI driver

from the previous version. Continue the installation procedure.

NOTE

• The messages that appear in this window may differ somewhat

depending on your browser.

NOTE

• (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window appears, click

[Run].

NOTE

• (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window appears,

click [Continue] or [Yes].

NOTE

Windows 2000

● Checking the version of the driver

Open the

“Control Panel” and double-click the

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon.

A window appears and the driver version is

indicated in the lower left of the window.

Windows Vista/7

Windows XP

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen

appears.

NOTE

• This display will not appear when using Windows XP x64/Vista/7.

No restart is necessary.

NOTE

• When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the “Yamaha

USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon.

NOTE

96 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■ Installing the Musicsoft

Downloader

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

The start window will appear automatically

showing software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader].

Click the [Install] button, and follow the

on-screen instructions to install the soft-

ware.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions

see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Down-

loader application and click “Help”.

*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

■ Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your com-

puter?

When you connect the instrument to the

computer for the ﬁrst time, if the “Add (Found)

New Hardware Wizard” or the “Found New

Hardware” window does not appear, the USB

function on the computer may be disabled.

Perform the following steps.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or

“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”

mark, the USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will

not be able to install the driver. Delete the

“Unknown device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu

“View devices by type”.

3 If you ﬁnd “Other devices”, double-click it

to extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-

ment, and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again. (pages 94–95)

•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows

2000, XP, Vista or 7.

IMPORTANT

• If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My

Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.

Then, proceed to step 2 below.

NOTE

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer ﬁles between

this instrument and a computer. No other ﬁle transfer application

can be used.

IMPORTANT

The driver cannot be installed.

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 97

• Did you install the driver? (page 94)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

•Are the volume settings of the instrument,

playback device, and application program set

to the appropriate levels?

•Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

•Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver?

The latest driver can be downloaded from the

following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system

requirements?

• Is any other application or device driver run-

ning?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be

able to suspend/resume normally, depending on

the particular environment (USB Host

Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting

and connecting the USB cable will allow you to

use the instrument functions again.

[Windows 2000/XP]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings]

➔

) [Control Panel]

➔

[Add or Remove Pro-

grams] to display the Add or Remove Pro-

grams panel.

4 Click “Change or Remove Programs”

located in the upper left, then select

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha

Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the

right panel.

Click [Remove].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions

to remove the software.

[Windows Vista/7]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control

Panel]

➔

[Programs and Features] or

[Uninstall a program] to display the “Unin-

stall or change a program” window.

4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or

“Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the

list.

Click [Uninstall].

If the “User Account Control” window

appears, click [Allow] or [Continue].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions

to remove the software.

When controlling the instrument from your

computer via USB, the instrument does not

operate correctly or no sound is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the

computer correctly.

How can I remove the software?

98 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS

BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO

BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE

WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS

SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads

and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained

by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which

you must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-

WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-

sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate

automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termi-

nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-

panying written documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-

CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.

SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,

YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET

YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN

THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide

by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a

court of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-

forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-

ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or

revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a

fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 99

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interfer-

ence. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the

instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“External Clock” on page 87.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the

split point at an appropriate key (page 72).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number

131 or a style between 143 and 155 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–155 (Pia-

nist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin

playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if

style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or

Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time,

some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or

song.

Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes

simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t

sound when playing arpeggios.

You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony

(the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the

instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes

are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback

functions.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch

cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when you are

going to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types

01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompani-

ment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range.

Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06–12

you need to play two notes at the same time.

Appendix

100 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual

Index

[ ](Standby/On) ............................ 11–12

+, - .................................................. 12, 58

........................................................ 57

0–9 .................................................. 12, 58

A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78

ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34

ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14

ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58

DC IN ............................................. 10, 13

DEMO ............................................ 12, 40

Dial ................................................. 12, 58

DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29

EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50

FF ................................................... 13, 40

FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82

HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60

INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71

KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18

LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44

LESSON START ........................... 12, 44

MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71

MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24

MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80

METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63

MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49

PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40

PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT

ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23

PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13

PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66

PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31

REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52

REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80

REPEAT & LEARN ............... 12, 48

REW ............................................... 13, 40

SONG ............................................. 12, 39

SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52

SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30

START/STOP ................................ 13, 58

STYLE ........................................... 12, 33

SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13

SYNC START ............................... 13, 70

SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71

TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27

TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65

USB ................................................ 13, 86

VOICE ............................................ 12, 28

A-B Repeat ...........................................78

Accessories .............................................7

ACMP ...................................................34

Arpeggio ...............................................14

Arpeggio Type ......................................15

Arpeggio Velocity ................................67

Attack ....................................................20

Auto Accompaniment Range ................34

Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34

AWM ......................................................6

Backup ..................................................56

CD-ROM ..............................................92

Channel Message ..................................86

Chord ..................................36, 38, 75–76

Chord Dictionary ..................................77

CHORD ROOT ....................................77

CHORD TYPE .....................................77

Chorus .............................................19, 62

Chorus Type .........................................62

Computer ..............................................86

Cutoff ....................................................19

Default Setting ......................................82

Delete (Song Track) ..............................55

Delete (User Song) ...............................55

Demo ....................................................40

Demo Cancel ........................................84

Display ..................................................59

Drum Kit ...............................................32

Dual Voice ............................................29

Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83

Dual Voice Octave ................................83

Dual Voice Pan .....................................83

Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83

Dual Voice Volume ..............................83

Easy Chords ..........................................38

Easy Song Arranger ..............................50

External Song .......................................42

Filter ......................................................19

Filter (Style) ..........................................20

Flash Memory .......................................42

Foot Switch ...........................................11

Function ..........................................82–83

Grade .................................................... 45

Harmony ............................................... 60

Harmony Type ..................................... 60

Harmony Volume ................................. 69

Headphones .......................................... 11

Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89

Initialization ......................................... 56

Keyboard Out ....................................... 87

Lesson .................................................. 43

Load SFF .............................................. 74

Local ..................................................... 87

L-Part ................................................... 91

Main Voice ........................................... 28

Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83

Main Voice Octave .............................. 83

Main Voice Pan .................................... 83

Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83

Main Voice Volume ............................. 83

Master EQ Type ................................... 69

Measure ................................................ 59

Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79

Metronome ........................................... 63

MIDI ..................................................... 85

Music Database .................................... 49

Music Rest .............................................. 7

Mute ..................................................... 79

Notation ................................................ 59

One Touch Setting ............................... 68

PC Mode .............................................. 88

Performance assistant technology ........ 23

Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83

Power Adaptor ..................................... 10

Preset Song ............................... 39, 41–42

Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order

Index

YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 101

Recording ............................................. 52

Registration Memory ........................... 80

Release ................................................. 20

Remote control ..................................... 88

Repeat ................................................... 48

Resonance ............................................ 19

Reverb ............................................ 19, 61

R-Part ................................................... 91

Save (Backup File) ............................... 91

Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89

Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98

Song ...................................................... 39

Song Clear ............................................ 55

Song List .............................................. 41

Song Memory ....................................... 52

Song Out ............................................... 87

Song Volume ........................................ 78

Specifications ..................................... 102

Split Point ....................................... 30, 72

Split Voice ............................................ 30

Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83

Split Voice Octave ............................... 83

Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83

Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83

Split Voice Volume .............................. 83

Standard Chords ................................... 38

Style .......................................... 33–37, 70

Style File .............................................. 74

Style Out ............................................... 87

Style Tempo ......................................... 20

Style Volume ........................................ 72

Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11

Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70

Synchro Stop ........................................ 71

System Message ................................... 86

Tempo .................................................. 27

Time Denominator ............................... 64

Time Numerator ................................... 64

Time Signature ..................................... 63

Touch Response ................................... 65

Touch Sensitivity ................................. 65

Track .............................................. 52–55

Track Clear ........................................... 55

Transfer .......................................... 89–91

Transpose ............................................. 66

Troubleshooting (Installation) .............. 96

Troubleshooting (Instrument) .............. 99

Tuning .................................................. 66

USB ......................................................86

User Song .............................................52

Voice .....................................................28

XGlite .....................................................6

102

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• (Standby/On)

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

• Knobs A, B

A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo

B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance

Voice

• 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices

+ 15 arpeggio voices

• Polyphony: 32

• DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 155 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,

SYNC START, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 256

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

•8 banks x 2 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensi-

tivity, Pitch Bend Range

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• ARPEGGIO: Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity

• SFF Load: Style File Load

•

PC: PC Mode

•

MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume

• LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)

• UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel

Effects

• Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

• Arpeggio: 50 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM

Songs (70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF,

START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 7W (PA-130)

• 10W (PA-3C)

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130, PA-3C, or an equivalent

• Batteries:

Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4")

Weight

• 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries)

Included Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor (PA-130, PA-3C or an equivalent)

* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right

to change or modify products or specifications at any time

without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or op-

tions may not be the same in every locale, please check with

your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor: PA-130, PA-3C or an equivalent

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30

394

Speciﬁcations

103

395

104

396

105

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, PSR-E, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and

every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer

you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from

Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the ﬁfty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in

the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized

Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions

or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor

or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha speciﬁcations for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will

pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not

cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation

or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be

presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any

unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modiﬁed or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic

maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature

or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f)

RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certiﬁed or uncertiﬁed equipment, if

applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This

warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful,

contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective

product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain

as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or

check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be

accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of

the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any

product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be

accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY

NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

This is the only express warranty applicable to the product speciﬁed herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please

contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o represen-

tante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor autorizado rela-

cionado a seguir.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387 8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB50

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WT69320 002POXXX.X-XXC0

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. NOTICE: Model Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL YPT-420 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : YPT-420 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) 1 (battery) (class B) YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. • Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Use the specified adaptor (page 102) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Keep batteries away from children. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/ - polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. • The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • It emits unusual smells or smoke. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Some object has been dropped into the instrument. • There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. 4 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 1/2 2 (7)-1 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. Connections Handling caution • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below. ■ Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. ■ Saving data • The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer. • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. Information ● About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. 3 (weee_battery_en) (7)-1 2/2 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Panel Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a real musical instrument! STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 4 6 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Digital Keyboard! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. About the Manuals This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials. ● Included Documents • Owner’s Manual (this book) Provides overall explanations of this instrument. • Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles and Effects. ● Online Materials (Downloadable from the web) The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library. Access the Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (YPT-420, for example) in the Model Name area to search the manuals. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ • MIDI Reference The MIDI Reference contains MIDI related information, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation chart. • MIDI Basics If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. Included Accessories The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Owner’s Manual • Data List • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM • AC Power Adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. ● Music Rest 5 Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features ■ Creating New Sounds Page 18 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! ■ Arpeggio Function Page 14 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 23 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 33 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. PopBossa 092 6 8 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Contents Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6 Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6 About the Manuals ................................................................. 7 Included Accessories ............................................................. 7 Special Features .................................................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements ........................................................... 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11 Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Front Panel .......................................................................... 12 Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13 Quick Guide Creating Arpeggios 14 Create Original Sounds 18 Reference Adding Effects 60 Harmony............................................................................... 60 Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61 Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62 Handy Performance Features Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18 Using the Knobs................................................................... 21 The Easy Way to Play Piano 23 Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23 Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT .......................................................................... 30 Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31 Drum Kits 32 Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32 Playing Styles 33 Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33 Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38 Using Songs 39 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40 Types of Songs .................................................................... 42 Select a Song For a Lesson 43 Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46 Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48 Play Using the Music Database 49 Change a Song’s Style 50 Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50 Record Your Own Performance 52 63 The Metronome.................................................................... 63 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat .......................................... 64 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ........................................ 64 Tap Start .............................................................................. 65 Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65 Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66 Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 68 Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................ 69 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................. 69 70 Pattern Variation (Sections) ................................................. 70 Adjusting the Style Volume .................................................. 72 Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ................................................... 73 Loading Style Files............................................................... 74 Chord Basics........................................................................ 75 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77 Song Settings 78 Song Volume........................................................................ 78 A-B Repeat........................................................................... 78 Muting Independent Song Parts........................................... 79 Change the Melody Voice .................................................... 79 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80 Saving to the Registration Memory ...................................... 80 Recalling a Registration Memory ......................................... 81 The Functions 82 Selecting and Setting Functions........................................... 82 Connecting to a Computer 85 What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 85 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 86 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer..... 87 Remote Control of MIDI Devices.......................................... 88 Initial Send ........................................................................... 89 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ................................. 92 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 93 System Requirements.......................................................... 94 Software Installation............................................................. 94 Appendix Troubleshooting................................................................. 99 Index.................................................................................. 100 Specifications................................................................... 102 Track Configuration.............................................................. 52 Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song............................................................ 55 Backup and Initialization 56 Backup ................................................................................. 56 Initialization .......................................................................... 56 Basic Operation and Displays 57 7 Basic Operation ................................................................... 57 Display Items ....................................................................... 59 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the instrument is set to Standby. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 102) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. AC adaptor AC outlet For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION ■ Using Batteries Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. • Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. 8 10 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) The internal speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 86). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the instrument. • Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 94. NOTE • Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. Turning the Power On Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again to turn the power OFF. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION 9 • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in data loss. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List (page 41) q w @3 @4 @5 e r t y u i !0 @6 @7 @8 Style Category List (separate Data List) !2 !3 !4 !5 o !1 @9 #0 Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 #1 #4 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24 e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65 r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60 t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29 !5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31 !6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82 !7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons......................................pages 58, 82 r q [ ] (Standby/On) switch ................. page 11 !4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63 f Front Panel !8 [SONG] button................................. page 39 y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ................... page 30 !9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button............................................... page 50 u [DEMO] button ................................. page 40 @0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33 i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44 @1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28 o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44 @2 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82 !0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14 !1 [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23 @3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18 !2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82 @5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34 !3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49 @4 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21 10 12 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (separate Data List) !7 !6 #2 Voice Category List (separate Data List) !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 #3 #5 Rear Panel #6 @6 [A-B REPEAT]/ [SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71 @7 [PAUSE]/ [SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70 @8 [REW]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71 #7 #8 #9 Rear Panel #6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86 #7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11 #8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11 #9 DC IN jack ........................................ page 10 @9 [FF]/ [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71 #0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58 #1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27 #2 REGIST MEMORY [●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80 #3 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52 NOTE • Only the following four buttons light up when selected. (Other buttons do not light up even if selected.) !8 !9 @0 @1 [SONG] button [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button [STYLE] button [VOICE] button 11 #4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66 #5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 13 e d ck Gui ui Q Creating Arpeggios Quick Guide The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggiotype phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. GrandPno 001 001 The ARPEGGIO icon appears when the arpeggio function is on. ● Voices and the Arpeggio Function This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143 the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automatically be turned off when you select any other voice. NOTE • See “Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices” on page 28. If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function off after selecting the voice. ● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on. Voice No. 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 Voice Name Synth Sequence Sawtooth Lead Arpeggio Analog Sequence Chord Sequence Sawtooth Square Pulse Trance Synth Echo Voice No. 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Voice Name Piano Arpeggio Ballad Electric Piano Guitar Chord Guitar Arpeggio Acid Synth Arabic Loop Massive Percussion 12 14 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 2 Select an arpeggio type. The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. ARP Type Hold for longer than a second DownOct1 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided in the separate Data List. 3 Play the keyboard. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also record your performance (page 52). NOTE • Make sure that you are not pressing any of the keyboard’s keys while turning the arpeggio function on or off. The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the same time as the harmony function. 13 4 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 15 Creating Arpeggios Create a Pop Tune You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds. 1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28). For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a single button press. 2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1 and 2 on the preceding page). For this example select “02 DownOct1”. That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function. 3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function. A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern. Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001 8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style. 8BtModrn 001 NOTE • Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33. 14 16 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 001 The ACMP ON icon will appear. When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only for specifying accompaniment chords. NOTE • Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm accompaniment will start. 6 Begin playing. C Am F G7sus4 Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together. The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord. Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes. If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes! Split point 15 Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the split point. (page 30) YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 17 e d ck Gui ui Q Create Original Sounds The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few tips for their use. Assigning Effects to the Knobs Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z → x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display. GrandPno 001 001 Number/Effect Knob A Knob B z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level c EG Attack Time Release Time v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above. It is not possible to assign different effect combinations. z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not be affected. v–b affect styles only. 16 18 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds z Filter Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. * Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Resonance Frequency x Effect Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level 17 Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth of the chorus effect. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 19 Create Original Sounds c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to most ideally match the music. Attack Time Release Time Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Level Sustain Level ATTACK DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the preceding page. b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo. 18 20 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds Using the Knobs 1 Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard. SquareLd 097 The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice. For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display). SquareLd 097 “z” appears here. Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob B can be used to adjust the resonance. 3 Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the right). Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance 19 Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 21 Create Original Sounds 4 Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the left hand. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registration Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve created (page 52). The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first operated after the new effect has been selected. ● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect Try This z FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (see the separate Data List for the Voice List). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. x EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. c EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. v STYLE FILTER Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo. 20 22 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The P.A.T. icon will appear after “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT”. Nocturne 011 Icon will appear when performance assistant technology is on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/ OFF] button to turn the function on or off. 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”. Song name AveMaria 010 The song displayed here will be played. 21 Song number YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 23 The Easy Way to Play Piano ● What is a “Song”? Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with a range of other functions (page 39). 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. Adjusts volume. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure. 4 Play on the keyboard. Before After Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 22 24 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Ave Maria is provided in the separate Data List. Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 23 To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a style with auto accompaniment on. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59). YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 25 The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 The procedure is that same as that described for playing Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”. Nocturne 011 2 Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part. 3 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Nocturne is provided in the separate Data List. 24 26 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Change the Song Tempo When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Tempo 090 Current tempo value You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. ● About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. First beat of measure Fourth beat 25 Second beat Third beat YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 27 e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name GrandPno 001 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 58) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “092 Flute” voice. r 2 Flute 092 3 Select 092 Flute Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. 26 28 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. NOTE • The dual voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Dual voice icon D.Voice Hold for longer than a second Marimba 110 3 NOTE • You can also select the Dual Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “D.Voice” item. f “D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. r 2 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The currently selected dual voice Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice. Vibes 27 109 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. NOTE • The split voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Split voice icon S.Voice NOTE • You can also select the Split Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “S.Voice” item. f “S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. r 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. FngrBass Hold for longer than a second 042 The currently selected SPLIT voice 28 30 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice. Folk Gtr 033 4 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE 29 • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 31 ck Gui ui Q e d Drum Kits This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Select and Play the Drum Kit Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 2 Press the [VOICE] button. Select the desired Drum kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128 by rotating the dial. Example: 117 Standard Kit 1 Std.Kit1 ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C G C o L ar ac as M og Ag ui ro Sh o la ve rt s n pe L O le H ba m Ti L o ga ng on C Bo H H i-H at C lo se d Pe i-H da l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p p at C d i-H H H an St la ick im n de Si pe O ne s ick St ta as C R t ap Sl Ta p h h us us Br Br Sh ot 117 H lic k h C h us q us Br Br Se S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl e Sn R ar oll e S Ki oft ck Ki Sof t ck Ti gh t Ki ck S n Sn ar are e Fl T oo igh r t Fl Tom oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal l a al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le Ji Op ng en le B Be ells ll T re e C3 * When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key. 3 Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be found in the Drum Kit List in the separate Data List. ● Drum Kit List 117 118 119 120 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit 121 122 123 124 Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit 125 126 127 128 Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 30 32 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 155 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see the separate Data List for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name 8BtModrn 001 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Style Number 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided in the separate Data List. PopBossa 092 Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 131, 143–155 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 34, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. 31 3 NOTE • An external style file loaded to style number 156 can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles. The style file must be loaded to style number 156 after transferring it to the instrument from a computer. For details, refer to the section “Loading Style Files” on page 74. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. PopBossa 092 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 72. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PopBossa 092 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 32 34 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. 33 You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■ Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 031 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 34 36 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 148 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 091 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 35 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■ Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■ Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 (b5) C7 (#11) (9) C M7 C sus4 Cm Cm C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C sus2 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. 38 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 36 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. 012 37 The song displayed here can be played YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 39 Using Songs 3 001–030 Built in Songs (see next page) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91) Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001). You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. 38 40 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Using Songs ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD No. Name 1 CHORD Groove It 2 CHORD Winter Serenade 3 CHORD Synth Zone 4 CHORD Grand Piano Demo 5 CHORD Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo 6 CHORD Cool! Rotor Organ Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 The Last Rose of Summer 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Die Lorelei 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock Suggested Uses The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the performance assistant technology feature. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. 39 The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 30 and song 20 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in the separate Data List. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 41 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files—from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance External song file Record Transfer (page 52) (page 90) External song files can be saved to flash memory (036–). Song Storage locations in the instrument Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) Flash Memory (036–) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Stored in the internal flash memory. Save to internal flash memory. Currently available. NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. Play 40 42 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 89–91) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson start! NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them.. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. ForElise 41 012 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 43 Select a Song For a Lesson 2 3 Select the part you want to practice. Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in sequence: right hand → left hand → both hands → right hand .... The currently selected part is shown in the display. Right Right-hand lesson Left Left-hand lesson BothHand Both-hands lesson Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The currently selected mode is shown in the display. Waiting (Lesson 1) r1 YourTemp (Lesson 2) r2 MinusOne (Lesson 3) r3 ForElise (Song Lesson off) 012 Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Start the lesson! 42 44 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Waiting r1 Left-hand part In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. 007 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■ See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ~~~~~~~~ Excellent Very Good ~~~~~~ ~~~~ Good ~~ OK When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 84). 43 After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 45 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... YourTemp r2 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. In this case “r2” indicate that righthand lesson 2 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 44 46 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... MinusOne r3 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. In this case “r3” indicate that righthand lesson 3 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. 45 3 Stop the Lesson mode. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 47 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Press immediately Oops! A mistake! 46 48 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. AlvFever 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List in the separate Data List, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”. DayOfW&R 124 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about playing chords. Split Point 47 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 49 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Halleluj 009 2 The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. 48 50 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Song start! 4 NOTE • When playing song numbers 010, 011 and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The style number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different style. PopShf 1 015 5 6 The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. Select a style. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice. GrandPno 001 7 The currently selected voice number and name are displayed here. Change the song’s melody voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice. SONG MEL 49 Hold for longer than a second YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 51 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. ● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part. NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded if you record only to the style track. Track Configuration To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later. Melody • Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody part (MELODY R) Chords Specify track(s) and record • Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody part (MELODY L) • Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” performance data. Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 • Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accompaniment) part. Track A NOTE Right-hand melody Left-hand melody Other performance data • The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L … Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. Style The parts played by each track when a user song is played back. Recording Procedure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 031 Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 50 52 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. User 1 001 rEC CAUTION • If you record to a track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. User 1 • If you use a split voice for recording, notes played to the left of the split point will not be recorded. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. 001 rEC To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. NOTE You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. User 1 rEC 003 • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 55) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Recording starts Current measure 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. 51 or YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 53 Record Your Own Performance If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ● Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 52 54 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second Press and hold 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. YES A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. 53 The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 55 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style Files • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■ Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file 156—turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■ Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song data and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, song data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. 54 56 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall control of the instrument is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function. Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 1 Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. 55 Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 57 Basic Operation and Displays 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. ForElise 012 This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice and style. It also displays the name and current setting/ value of other functions. f ● CATEGORY [ Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f Decrease r ● Dial r ■ Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Example: VOICE SELECT SweetFlt Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. 090 The first voice in the selected category is selected. ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) 3 Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. r In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). 56 58 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (see page 27) 001 Chord Display NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (see page 65) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (see page 60) Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Song Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see page 52, 79) GrandPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (see page 29) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (see page 30) ARPEGGIO Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (see page 27) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (see page 14) Knob Assign Display Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (see page 23) This display allows you to visually confirm parameters assigned to the knobs. (see page 18) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (see page 34) SYNC STOP 57 Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (see page 71) YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 59 Reference e erenc ef R Adding Effects Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). HarmType Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 The currently selected harmony type ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34). • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 58 60 You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 69). Adding Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. StyleVol 100 r f 2 Hall3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. “Reverb” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 03 Selected reverb type Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available reverb types. ● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 83.) Reverb Hall2 02 59 The currently selected reverb type YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 61 Adding Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus2 2 Selected chorus type Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available chorus types. Chorus ● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 83.) Chorus1 1 The currently selected chorus type 60 62 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■ Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. ■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo GrandPno 001 090 1 Current Tempo setting 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280. 1 61 Indicates the beat number in the measure YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Performance Features Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. f OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. r 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/ Hold for longer than a second. TimesigN 04 Number of beats per measure. TimesigD 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. 04 The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 62 64 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/ song will begin playing at the tapped tempo. Touch Response Sensitivity When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn touch response on. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on (page 59). GrandPno 001 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Touch response icon 2 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Hold for longer than a second. Medium 2 63 Touch Sensitivity YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 65 Handy Performance Features Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpos 00 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Tuning 000 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 64 66 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will appear. ARP Velo Original 1 65 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 67 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 28). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. SweetSpr 000 Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 39). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE] button after changing songs to see the name of the voice being used. sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 66 68 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Harmony Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the harmony volume between 000 and 127. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Harmony Volume item. HarmVol 080 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. MasterEQ Speakerl 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. 67 f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will appear. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 69 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. 68 70 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. MAIN A ENDING The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 38. Split point Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B 69 When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 71 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 through 127. longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice Hold for longer than a second SplitPnt NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. r NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 82). f 054 Split point 70 72 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 38). Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. PopBossa 092 Appears when auto accompaniment is on 71 Accompaniment range YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 73 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files This instrument features 155 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 156 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 156. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Execute the load operation. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 72 74 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Major chord Flatted 7 th Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th C M7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord 73 Minor chord Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■ Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) C(9) C6 (9) Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C M7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C (9) CM7 (9) * (#11) CM7(#11) * (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm (9) (9) C m7 (11) Cm7(9) 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 (9) C mM7 (b5) C m7 (b5) CmM7(9) * Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 C mM7 C dim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 C dim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Cdim (b9) C7(b9) (b13) C7(b13) (9) C7(9) (#11) C7(#11) (13) C7(13) (#9) C7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 C* * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. 74 76 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second Dict. 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. Dict. 001 NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- 75 paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 77 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. SongVol 100 Song volume A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 39) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 76 78 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information about the song track configuration. Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 Select the song and play it. 2 Rotate the dial to select the voice you 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings SONG MEL 77 050 Hold for longer than a second YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [●] (MEMORY/ BANK) button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Writing! Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. 78 80 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type • Arpeggio settings Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. REGIST 1 79 1 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 81 e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 83. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 3 Select a function. r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Transpos • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. 00 The selected function. Some function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 56 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 56. 80 82 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual The Functions ● Function Setting List Setting Item title Range/Settings Description StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”— in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Voice Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time. Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time. Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency. Main Voice Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance. Dual Voice D.Voice 001–504 Selects the Dual voice. Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Voice Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time. Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time. Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency. Dual Voice Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance. Split Voice S.Voice 001–504 Selects the Split voice. Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Voice Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 81 Style Volume YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 83 The Functions Setting Item title Range/Settings Description Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list in the separate Data List.) Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list in the separate Data List.) Master EQ Type MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list in the separate Data List.) Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–50 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14) Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87) External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87) Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 82 84 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Connecting to a Computer Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers, sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide standard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Naturally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as well as the songs, styles and panel settings. The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions provided by this instrument. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”, “when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. ● Digital instrument note production L Tone Generator Sampling (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note Note R Playing the keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. 1 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Your keyboard performance and all panel operations of this instrument are processed as MIDI data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and User songs are also made up of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and it allows different musical instruments and devices to instantly communicate with each other, via digital data. The MIDI standard is used all over the world and was designed to transmit performance data between electronic musical instruments (or computers). Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument from another and transmit performance data between the devices-taking your creative and performance potential to even higher levels. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. 83 As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? Voice number (with what voice) YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 85 Connecting to a Computer ● Channel Messages This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up to sixteen different instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc. Note ON/OFF Performance data of the keyboard (contains note number and velocity data) Realtime Messages Start/stop operation Program Change Instrument selection (including bank select MSB/LSB, if necessary) Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.) Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 92. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using a standard USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see page 90. ■ Precautions when using the [USB] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB] terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play notes on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Instrument USB cable NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During style playback. • During song playback. 84 86 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal Instrument USB cable ■ MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, the most likely cause is that Local Control has been set to off. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. r CAUTION f Item CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 85 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer ■ PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF Local OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. PC mode oFF 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. r f NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 82). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■ Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. 86 88 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the 70 MIDI songs and 5 Style files provided on the CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. Songs and styles transferred to the instrument can be used with the instrument’s lesson and other functions. In order to transfer songs between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation details. ■ With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded from the Internet or created on your computer from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 90. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. 87 ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs (Song 036–) • Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb • Data Format: SMF format 0, style file (extension: .sty), Backup File (06PK61.BUP) ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 89 Connecting to a Computer ● Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 91. q Click the CD-ROM drive Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. ■ Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 94). w Double-click “SampleData” Folder → “SongData” Folder, and click the desired song file. e Click “Open” 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the specific “SongData” folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. 88 90 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. Style files (files with the “.STY” extension) can be transferred to Flash memory using the same procedure as described above. Style files transferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into style number 156 and then played (page 74). ■ Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. 89 We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 91 e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on page 98 before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. • Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and download the latest version of the software from the following site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other than a computer. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or damage your equipment. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. 90 92 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear automatically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.) q w Folder Name q MSD_ Application / Data Name Musicsoft Downloader USBdrv32_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 32-bit version Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) USBdrv64_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 64-bit version Windows XP/Vista/7) w e SongBook SampleData Song Book e Contents This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. Refer to page 96 for installation instructions. This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. Refer to page 94 for installation instructions. Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, 30 and song 20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in the separate Data List. SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files These songs, styles, or data* can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. MDB 5 Music Database data * This instrument does not support Music Database data. 91 In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Data OS Musicsoft Downloader Memory Hard Disk Display 233 MHz or higher; Intel Pentium/Celeron Processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 128 MB or more (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/XP Home Edition (SP2/SP3)/2000 (SP4) 166 MHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) 10 MB or more — Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2) Intel 64 compatible processor 256 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/ SP2) 800 MHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows 7 1.4 GHz or higher; Intel Core/Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 1 GB or more (32-bit)/2 GB or more (64-bit) 10 MB or more — Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Windows 7 USB Driver for Windows Computer Software Installation If you have any problems with the installation, refer to the troubleshooting section on page 96. 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com- ■ Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI Driver ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI instruments connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from instruments via a USB cable. 3 4 5 puter except for the mouse and computer keyboard. Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. Turn off the power of the instrument. Connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB terminal of the MIDI instrument with a standard USB cable. NOTE • Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB devices. NOTE Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI instrument Driver • If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB connection at the same time, connect all the instruments to the computer and turn on the power for all of them, then perform the following installation procedure. 6 Turn on the power of the instrument(s). 7 When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears, click [Cancel]. Follow the steps below to install (or update) the USB-MIDI driver. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. 92 94 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the message “Device driver software was not successfully installed.” appears, continue the installation procedure. Windows XP NOTE • This screen will not appear if you are updating the USB-MIDI driver from the previous version. Continue the installation procedure. 8 Open the following folder from the CD- ROM drive in your “My Computer” folder, and double click “setup.exe.” • For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/ Vista/7: “USBdrv32_” • For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7: “USBdrv64_” Windows Vista/7 *Select [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [System] to check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition” appears on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on the 32 bit version.) 9 When the “File Download” window appears, click [Run] or [Open]. The “Preparing to install” window appears. The next window will appear after finishing this preparation. NOTE • The messages that appear in this window may differ somewhat depending on your browser. NOTE • (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window appears, click [Run]. NOTE • (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue] or [Yes]. 10 When the “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” window appears, click [Next]. If the warning message below appears during the installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or [Install]. Windows 2000 11 When a message appears indicating that the driver has been successfully installed, click [Finish]. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. 12 When a window appears prompting you to restart the computer, do so. Restart the computer by following the on-screen directions. NOTE • This display will not appear when using Windows XP x64/Vista/7. No restart is necessary. ● Checking the version of the driver Open the “Control Panel” and double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon. A window appears and the driver version is indicated in the lower left of the window. 93 NOTE • When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 95 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■ Installing the Musicsoft Downloader ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive. Then, proceed to step 2 below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader]. 3 Click the [Install] button, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. ■ Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add (Found) New Hardware Wizard” or the “Found New Hardware” window does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. (pages 94–95) 94 96 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 94) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? How can I remove the software? [Windows 2000/XP] 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 • Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings] ➔) [Control Panel] ➔ [Add or Remove Programs] to display the Add or Remove Programs panel. 4 Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? Click “Change or Remove Programs” located in the upper left, then select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the right panel. 5 Click [Remove]. • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. • Is any other application or device driver running? [Windows Vista/7] Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control Panel] ➔ [Programs and Features] or [Uninstall a program] to display the “Uninstall or change a program” window. 4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list. 5 Click [Uninstall]. 95 If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Allow] or [Continue]. A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 97 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE 98 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 96 You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. • • • • When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 87. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 72). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–155 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two notes at the same time. 97 No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 131 or a style between 143 and 155 (Pianist). YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 99 Index Panel controls and terminals r f [ ](Standby/On) ............................ 11–12 +, - .................................................. 12, 58 ........................................................ 57 0–9 .................................................. 12, 58 A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34 ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14 ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58 DC IN ............................................. 10, 13 DEMO ............................................ 12, 40 Dial ................................................. 12, 58 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50 FF ................................................... 13, 40 FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71 KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18 LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44 LESSON START ........................... 12, 44 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49 PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40 PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80 REPEAT & LEARN ............... 12, 48 REW ............................................... 13, 40 SONG ............................................. 12, 39 SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30 START/STOP ................................ 13, 58 STYLE ........................................... 12, 33 SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13 SYNC START ............................... 13, 70 SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71 TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27 TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65 USB ................................................ 13, 86 VOICE ............................................ 12, 28 Alphabetical order A G A-B Repeat ...........................................78 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................34 Arpeggio ...............................................14 Arpeggio Type ......................................15 Arpeggio Velocity ................................67 Attack ....................................................20 Auto Accompaniment Range ................34 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34 AWM ......................................................6 Grade .................................................... 45 H Harmony ............................................... 60 Harmony Type ..................................... 60 Harmony Volume ................................. 69 Headphones .......................................... 11 I B Backup ..................................................56 C CD-ROM ..............................................92 Channel Message ..................................86 Chord ..................................36, 38, 75–76 Chord Dictionary ..................................77 CHORD ROOT ....................................77 CHORD TYPE .....................................77 Chorus .............................................19, 62 Chorus Type .........................................62 Computer ..............................................86 Cutoff ....................................................19 D Default Setting ......................................82 Delete (Song Track) ..............................55 Delete (User Song) ...............................55 Demo ....................................................40 Demo Cancel ........................................84 Display ..................................................59 Drum Kit ...............................................32 Dual Voice ............................................29 Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83 Dual Voice Octave ................................83 Dual Voice Pan .....................................83 Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83 Dual Voice Volume ..............................83 Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89 Initialization ......................................... 56 K Keyboard Out ....................................... 87 L Lesson .................................................. 43 Load SFF .............................................. 74 Local ..................................................... 87 L-Part ................................................... 91 M Main Voice ........................................... 28 Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83 Main Voice Octave .............................. 83 Main Voice Pan .................................... 83 Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83 Main Voice Volume ............................. 83 Master EQ Type ................................... 69 Measure ................................................ 59 Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79 Metronome ........................................... 63 MIDI ..................................................... 85 Music Database .................................... 49 Music Rest .............................................. 7 Mute ..................................................... 79 N E Notation ................................................ 59 Easy Chords ..........................................38 Easy Song Arranger ..............................50 External Song .......................................42 O One Touch Setting ............................... 68 F Filter ......................................................19 Filter (Style) ..........................................20 Flash Memory .......................................42 Foot Switch ...........................................11 Function ..........................................82–83 P PC Mode .............................................. 88 Performance assistant technology ........ 23 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83 Power Adaptor ..................................... 10 Preset Song ............................... 39, 41–42 98 100 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual Index R U Recording ............................................. 52 Registration Memory ........................... 80 Release ................................................. 20 Remote control ..................................... 88 Repeat ................................................... 48 Resonance ............................................ 19 Reverb ............................................ 19, 61 R-Part ................................................... 91 USB ......................................................86 User Song .............................................52 V Voice .....................................................28 X S XGlite .....................................................6 Save (Backup File) ............................... 91 Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89 Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98 Song ...................................................... 39 Song Clear ............................................ 55 Song List .............................................. 41 Song Memory ....................................... 52 Song Out ............................................... 87 Song Volume ........................................ 78 Specifications ..................................... 102 Split Point ....................................... 30, 72 Split Voice ............................................ 30 Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Octave ............................... 83 Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83 Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Volume .............................. 83 Standard Chords ................................... 38 Style .......................................... 33–37, 70 Style File .............................................. 74 Style Out ............................................... 87 Style Tempo ......................................... 20 Style Volume ........................................ 72 Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11 Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70 Synchro Stop ........................................ 71 System Message ................................... 86 T 99 Tempo .................................................. 27 Time Denominator ............................... 64 Time Numerator ................................... 64 Time Signature ..................................... 63 Touch Response ................................... 65 Touch Sensitivity ................................. 65 Track .............................................. 52–55 Track Clear ........................................... 55 Transfer .......................................... 89–91 Transpose ............................................. 66 Troubleshooting (Installation) .............. 96 Troubleshooting (Instrument) .............. 99 Tuning .................................................. 66 YPT-420 Owner’s Manual 101 Specifications Specifications Recording Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI Setup • (Standby/On) • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel • Knobs A, B A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance Voice • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 • 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices + 15 arpeggio voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 155 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume Music Database Power Consumption • 7W (PA-130) • 10W (PA-3C) Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130, PA-3C, or an equivalent • Batteries: Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4") Weight • 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries) Included Accessories • AC Power Adaptor (PA-130, PA-3C or an equivalent) • 256 Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 8 banks x 2 types * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • • • • • Music Rest Accessory CD-ROM Owner’s Manual Data List My Yamaha Product User Registration Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume ARPEGGIO: SFF Load: PC: MIDI: Optional Accessories • • • • AC Power Adaptor: Footswitch: Keyboard Stand: Headphones: PA-130, PA-3C or an equivalent FC4/FC5 L-2C/L-2L HPE-150/HPE-30 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out • METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume • LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) • UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel Effects • • • • Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 50 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology 394 102 395 103 396 104 LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, PSR-E, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha. 105 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor autorizado relacionado a seguir. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387 8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB50 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2009 Yamaha Corporation WT69320 002POXXX.X-XXC0 Printed in China